Dodge 2010 Ram Owners Manual Truck Owner's Guide

2015-09-07

: Dodge Dodge-2010-Ram-Owners-Manual-762135 dodge-2010-ram-owners-manual-762135 dodge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 608 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Ram Truck
OWNE R ’ S MAN UAL
2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................193
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................291
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 471
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................499
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................557
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 577
10
INDEX
...................................................................587
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵Van Conversions/Campers ................. 6
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 7
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) —
If Equipped ......................... 12
▫KeyFOB ........................... 13
▫Removing Key FOB From Ignition ......... 14
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 15
䡵Sentry Key威.......................... 15
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫Customer Key Programming ............. 17
▫General Information ................... 17
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫To Set The Alarm ..................... 18
▫To Disarm The System ................. 18
䡵Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 19
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20
▫To Unlock The Doors .................. 20
▫To Lock The Doors .................... 22
2
▫Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 23
▫Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 24
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 24
▫General Information ................... 25
䡵Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 25
▫How To Use Remote Start ............... 26
䡵Door Locks ........................... 28
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 28
▫Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 29
▫Child Protection Door Lock .............. 32
䡵Windows ............................ 34
▫Power Windows – If Equipped ............ 34
▫Wind Buffeting ....................... 37
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 37
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 38
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 46
▫Center Lap Belts ...................... 47
▫Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ......................... 47
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 48
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 48
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 49
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 50
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Driver And Right Front Passenger
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) –
Airbag ............................. 50
▫Airbag System Components .............. 51
▫Advanced Front Airbag Features .......... 52
▫Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 56
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 63
▫Child Restraint ....................... 64
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 76
䡵Safety Tips ........................... 77
▫Transporting Passengers ................ 77
▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 78
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 79
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 79
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the ON position.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3—ON
4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.
•
If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs
from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs
must then be reprogrammed.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, the system provides
both audible and visible signals. For the first three
minutes the horn will sound and the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals and
Vehicle Security Light will flash. The engine will run only
if a valid Sentry Key威is used to start the vehicle. Use of
the Sentry Key威will disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the
condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the
system will ignore that condition and monitor the re-
maining doors and ignition.
To Set the Alarm
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about
16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After
the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
ously during vehicle operation, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
To Disarm the System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will
sound three times when you unlock the doors and the
Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle
is started with a programmed Sentry Key威. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key威is used to start a vehicle, the
engine will run for two seconds and then the alarm will
be initiated. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button, or start the vehicle with a
programmed Sentry Key威.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
doors. This feature is only available if you have Remote
Keyless Entry.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the interior lights ON position (extreme right posi-
tion).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the extreme left position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held radio
transmitter with integrated key. The transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still hold-
ing the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
•
Fuel meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message on Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Remote Start Aborted - Hood Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted - Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted - System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
(if equipped). Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob into the ignition swich. Once inserted, the
message “Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
plunger down or unlocked by moving the lock plunger
up.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock plunger.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov-
ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Auto Lock Doors – If Equipped
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Auto Lock Doors Programming
The Auto Lock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled
as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the Key Fob into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the Key Fob from the OFF
position to the ON position a minimum of four times,
ending in the OFF position. (Do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis-
abled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the Key Fob from the OFF
position to the ON position a minimum of four times,
ending in the OFF position. (Do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door UNLOCK
switch.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-
sary, repeat the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
have the child protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial
counterclockwise to engage the lock and clockwise to
disengage the child protection locks. When the system on
Child Protection Door Lock Location
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After setting the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WINDOWS
Power Windows – If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威and
Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or
until a front door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
1 – Left Front 3 – Right Rear
2 – Right Front 4 – Left Rear
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, op-
erate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver’s and Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window. Any impact due to
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse
function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this
happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and
hold to close the window manually.
•
If the Auto-Up function is lost, reset the Auto-Up
function by running the window all the way up and
then hold the switch in the full up position for two
seconds.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the other
doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors,
press the window LOCK button into the latched or down
position. To enable the window controls, press the win-
dow LOCK button again and return the switch to the
released or up position.
Window Lockout Switch
1 – Window Lockout Switch
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or in partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
All seat belt systems (except driver’s and second row
center position) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab威and Crew
Cab front center seating position have combination lap/
shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to
lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
•A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
•A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
•A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in a vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the seat belt
tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle. The
black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor
to take up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will
hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing
up all the area behind the front seats.
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible “click”. For proper seatbelt usage, refer
“Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab威, Mega
Cab威and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威will con-
tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating the BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the
programming.
BeltAlert威can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) – Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Front Airbag
Airbag and Knee Boltser Location
1 — Driver and Passenger Air-
bag 2 — Knee Boltser
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors — if equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car (if equipped).
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
(Continued)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact protection to front and
rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided
by the body structure. Each airbag features inflated
chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard
occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head
injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both
windows on the impact side.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Side Curtain Airbag Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Airbags need
room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type
of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, or side
collisions.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever-
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on after the approximate four to
six-second interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child.
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing
an infant or child restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Quad Cab威, Mega
Cab威and Crew Cab rear seat outboard positions. LATCH
equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor
bars, located at the back of the seat cushion, and tether
strap anchorages, located behind the seat back (refer to
“Child Restraint Tether Anchor”).
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for
Quad Cab威/Mega Cab威/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Driver Side
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE:
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
•
If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab威, Mega Cab威or Crew Cab model rear seat. The
LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the
two outboard seating positions only. A child may be
placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad
Cab威, Mega Cab威or Crew Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one
each behind the front center and right seats. Quad Cab威,
Mega Cab威and Crew Cab models have three anchor-
ages, one behind each of the rear seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat
failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the seat
could come loose and allow the child to crash into the
inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or even be
thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor positions
directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap. Follow the instructions below. See your
authorized dealer for help if necessary.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1.
Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
(Quad Cab威/Crew Cab/Mega Cab威- Rear Seats)
Quad Cab威/Mega Cab威
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
Head Restraint Adjustment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab威/Mega Cab威
1 — Inner Anchor Strap Ring(s)
2 — Snap Hook
3 — Tether Strap
4 — Passenger’s Side Rear Child Seat
5 — Rear Center Child Seat
6 — Driver’s Side Rear Child Seat
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Crew Cab
1.
The tether straps loops are located between the rear glass
and the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind
each seating position. You can gain access to the center
seating position tether strap loop by raising the head re-
straint and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint, through the outboard tether strap loop, then
route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind
the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap through the tether strap loop
behind the center seat, and attach the hooks to the anchor
located directly behind the center rear seat located under
a plastic cover.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and
anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either
outboard seating positions.
Head Restraint Adjustment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors .............................. 87
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 87
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped ......................... 88
▫Outside Mirrors ...................... 88
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .......... 89
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 90
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 91
▫Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped ......................... 91
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped .... 92
▫“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped ......................... 92
▫Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 93
䡵Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped ........... 94
䡵Voice Command — If Equipped ............ 94
䡵Seats ............................... 94
▫Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped ....... 95
▫Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ...... 96
3
▫Adjustable Head Restraints .............. 97
▫Eight-Way Power Seats — If Equipped ..... 100
▫Power Lumbar — If Equipped ........... 101
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 102
▫Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......... 104
▫40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . 104
▫Mega Cab威Rear Seat Features ........... 105
䡵Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 108
▫Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory ................ 109
▫Memory Position Recall ................ 110
▫To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory ............................111
▫Self-Limiting Control .................. 112
▫Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control . . . 112
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............ 113
䡵Lights ............................. 115
▫Headlights ......................... 116
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 116
▫Smartbeam™ — If Equipped ............ 117
▫Headlight Delay ..................... 118
▫Parking Lights And Panel Lights ......... 118
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 118
▫Interior Lights ...................... 119
▫Cargo Light ........................ 120
▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 120
▫Battery Saver ....................... 120
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
(Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles) ......... 121
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 121
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 123
▫Windshield Wipers ................... 123
▫Windshield Washers .................. 124
▫Mist Feature ........................ 124
䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 124
䡵Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 125
䡵Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ..... 127
▫Adjustment ........................ 127
䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 128
▫To Activate ......................... 129
▫To Set a Desired Speed ................ 129
▫Deactivating Electronic Speed Control ...... 130
▫To Resume Speed .................... 130
▫Varying The Speed Setting .............. 130
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 131
䡵Parksense威Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 132
▫Parksense威Sensors ................... 132
▫Parksense威Warning Display ............ 132
▫Enable/Disable Parksense威............. 137
▫Service Parksense威................... 138
▫Cleaning Parksense威.................. 138
▫Parksense威System Usage
And Precautions ..................... 138
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
䡵Parkview威Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped .......................... 141
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio ....... 142
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off —
Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio ..... 143
䡵Overhead Console — If Equipped .......... 143
▫Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 144
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 145
▫Programming HomeLink威.............. 147
▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 149
▫Using HomeLink威................... 150
▫Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button ............................ 150
▫Security ........................... 150
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 151
▫General Information .................. 151
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 152
▫Open Sunroof — Express Mode .......... 153
▫Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 153
▫Pinch Protect Feature ................. 153
▫Pinch Protect Override ................ 153
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 153
▫Sunshade Operation .................. 154
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 154
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 154
▫Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 154
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵Electrical Power Outlets ................. 154
䡵Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped .......................... 158
䡵Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 159
䡵Cupholders .......................... 161
▫Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats) ..................... 161
▫Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
Floor Mounted Shifter ................. 162
▫Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab威.......... 162
▫Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab ........... 163
䡵Storage ............................. 163
▫Glove Box Storage ................... 163
▫Door Storage ....................... 165
▫Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped ........................ 166
▫Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped ........................ 168
▫Seatback Storage ..................... 169
▫Storage (Regular Cab) ................. 169
▫Storage And Seats (Crew Cab) ........... 170
▫Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) ................. 170
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 171
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 171
▫Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ........................ 172
▫Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ........................ 172
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
䡵Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped ........ 173
䡵Rambox威— If Equipped ................ 175
▫Rambox威Integrated Box Side
Storage Bins ........................ 176
▫Rambox威Safety Warning ............... 179
▫Bed Extender — If Equipped ............ 180
▫Bed Rail Tie-Down System .............. 187
䡵Slide-In Campers ...................... 189
▫Camper Applications .................. 189
䡵Easy-Off Tailgate ...................... 189
▫Disconnecting The Rear Camera —
If Equipped ........................ 189
▫Removing The Tailgate ................ 190
▫Locking Tailgate — If Equipped .......... 191
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
The mirror should be adjusted with the lever set in the
day position (lever flipped toward the windshield). The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the power button at the base of the mirror.
A light next to the button will illuminate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex right side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
Folding Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
Power Mirror Controls
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Mirror Control
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, press the mirror select button for the
mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control
switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction
that you want the mirror to move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirror Movement
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-
matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” Features of Sun Visor — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Extender
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
and can be adjusted separately.
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Phone
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. Proper use of the seats is needed for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or
rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found under the seat cushion at the front edge of each
seat. Pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or
backward to move the seat into the most comfortable
position.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position. To
adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back
on the seatback and release the handle at the desired
position. To return the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean forward and release the handle at the
desired position.
Recline Handle
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat-
back to swing (dump) forward on manual recliner
seats. Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
while actuating the handle. The seatback may
swing forward and hit you causing injury. This
dump feature allows access to the storage bin
behind the seat. To avoid injury, place your hand
on the seatback and actuate the handle then posi-
tion the seatback in the desired position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in
a seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with
the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is
no longer resting against your chest. If you ride in
this position, the shoulder harness will no longer
be restraining you. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal
injuries. Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is
parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint to it’s highest position, push in both buttons at
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously
pull up on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest
Adjusting Head Restraint Removing Head Restraint
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,
push the large button in and push down and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be adjusted. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, press the large button, located
on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on
the head restraint.
NOTE: The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab only) is
fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Adjustable Rear Head Restraints
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Eight-Way Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. The power seat switch can be moved
forward and backward as well as up and down to control
the position of the seat. The power seatback switch is
used to adjust the angle of the seatback to position
yourself in the most comfortable driving position. Push
forward or rearward on the switch and the seatback will
move in either direction.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar controls are located on the outboard side of
the seat cushion. The lumbar support can be increased by
pressing the front of the switch and decreased by press-
ing the back of the switch.
Lumbar Control Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Both front seats and rear passenger seats can be equipped
with heaters. The switches for the front seats are located
in the instrument panel under the climate controls. The
switches for the rear passenger seats are located on the
back of the center console.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-
level heating. Press the switch a sec-
ond time to select Low-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements Off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
The heated seats switch from High to Low and from Low
to Off automatically, based on time and temperature of
the seat. The heated seats can operate on High heat for as
little as 4 minutes and up to 30 minutes before switching
to Low heat. Once a seat has switched to the Low heat
setting it may operate for an additional 60 minutes before
automatically shutting Off. The heated seats can shut Off
early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The drivers heated seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans
that draw the air from around the occupant and exhaust
it underneath the seat and into the passenger compart-
ment. The fans draw this air across the surface of the seat
using air ducts and fine perforations in the covering to
help keep the driver cooler in higher ambient tempera-
tures.
The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls. The fans operate at two
speeds, High and Low.
Press the switch once to choose High,
press it a second time to choose Low.
Pressing the switch a third time will
turn the ventilated seat Off. When
High speed is selected both lights on
the switch will be illuminated. When Low speed is
selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE:
•
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
•
The drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote
Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
The back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage compartment (if
equipped).
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mega Cab姞Rear Seat Features
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. Pull upward on the handle, to release the
seatback, and lean forward or rearward to the desired
position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback:
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seats will drop and move
forward when the seatback is folded flat.
Table Mode Handle
Table Mode
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle, causing serious injury or possible death.
To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either
of the rear seats.
Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward. 3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
side of the drivers seat cushion.
Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to
recall the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror
position, adjustable brake, accelerator pedals position,
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) temperature set-
ting and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: The power lumbar option is not programmable
with driver memory seats.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked
to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE
Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store new settings.
1. Turn the vehicle key to the ON/RUN position.
Memory Seat Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both sideview
mirrors to the desired positions.
NOTE: Not all motors may be moved at one time. Refer
to “Seats/Eight-Way Power Seat” in this section for
further information.
3. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
4. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
5. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
while the ATC is in Auto mode.
6. Press and release the SET button located on the
driver’s seat.
7. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s seat. The next steps must be
performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
8. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position using the other numbered memory button or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Not all motors may be moved at one time. Refer to the
“Seats/Eight-Way Power Seat” in this section for fur-
ther information.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s seat or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s seat or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s seat during a recall (S,
1, or 2), or pressing any one of the power seat buttons,
pressing the adjustable pedals button, or pressing either
the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
when not in the ignition switch. When a recall is can-
celled, the driver’s seat and the pedals stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if setting memory
was inhibited for any reason.
To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release the memory SET button located on
the driver’s seat.
3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
memory position, repeat Steps 1-3 for each RKE trans-
mitter.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE: The capability to link RKE transmitters to
memory is enabled when delivered from the factory. The
capability to link RKE transmitters to memory can be
disabled (or later re-enabled) by an authorized dealer. For
vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Self-Limiting Control
The memory system includes a self-limiting control for
full travel positioning of power seat and adjustable pedal
movement (all directions). This self-limiting control may,
however, develop an unintended movement limitation if
an obstruction is encountered sometime during usage.
One example of such an occurrence may include a box or
package obstructing the full rearward movement of the
driver’s seat. Once the obstruction is removed, the self-
limiting control may store a new maximum position. the
self-limiting control may be reset by reaching the new
stored position, then press and release MEMORY button
1 or 2. Continued seat travel beyond the new stored
position will indicate the self-limiting control has been
reset.
Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control
This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning which will enhance driver mobility into and
out of the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rearward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is removed
from the ignition switch. The seat will move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed into
the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit
and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit and Easy Entry
feature may be automatically disabled if the seat is
positioned rearward enough and there is no benefit in
moving the seat any farther rearward.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release
it, before raising the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Automatic Headlight Position
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is re-
placed, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually
deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the
system to function improperly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Parking Lights and Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
parking light symbol. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Switch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter)
or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed
the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are
required during the day.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Cargo Light
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo
button.
The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately
30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Cargo Light Switch
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (Canada Only and
Fleet Vehicles)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signal Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
High/Low Beam Switch
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every two seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed until the
washer knob is released from this position. If the washer
knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will
operate for several seconds after the washer knob is
released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed for a
period greater than one second while in the off position,
the wiper will cycle approximately three times after the
wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multi-
function lever, inward to the first detent. The wipers will
cycle one time and automatically shut off to clear road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Tilt Steering Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE:
•
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
•
The heated steering wheel can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote
Starting System — If Equipped” in Section 4 for
further information.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
Adjustment
1. Position the driver’s seat so that you are at least 10 in
(25.4 cm) away from the airbag, located in the center of
the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left
side of the steering column, in the direction you desire
the pedals to move. NOTE: The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle
is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is
set.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located
on the right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)
once and the cruise indicator light (located in the mes-
sage window of the cluster) will illuminate showing that
the Electronic Speed Control system is on. To turn the
Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time and both the Electronic Speed
Control system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET lever downward and then release. Lift your foot
off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever (CANCEL) toward you will deacti-
vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, raise the Electronic
Speed Control lever (RESUME ACCEL) upwards and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Varying The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Raising the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME
ACCEL upwards once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h)
speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped upward
speed increases, so tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever SET DECEL
downward once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped downward, speed
decreases.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle
set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
PARKSENSE姞REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
bumper and the detected obstacle when backing up.
Refer to ParkSense威System Usage and Precautions for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense威will remember the last system state (enabled
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN/ON position.
ParkSense威can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense姞Sensors
The four ParkSense威sensors, located in the rear bumper,
monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the
sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear bumper
in the horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞Warning Display
The ParkSense威Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) (SETUP)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威Warning Display is located in the instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear bumper and the detected obstacle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Rear ParkSense威Display
Rear Park Assist On
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
ParkSense威will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a
1
⁄
2
second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will
show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
Rear Park Assist Disabled Slow Tone
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY MESSAGE OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: ARC’s AUDIBLE SIG-
NAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Park Assist ON None None
Warning Object Detected 78.7 in (200 cm) 3 Solid Yes, 1/2 second
Warning Object Detected 39.3 in (100 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected 27.5 in (70 cm) 31.4 in (80 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected 25.5 in (65 cm) 25.5 in (65 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 19.7 in (50 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 15.7 in (40 cm) 15.7 in (40 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 11.8 in (30 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) 1 Flashing Continuous Tone
NOTE: ParkSense威will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enable/Disable ParkSense姞
ParkSense威can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST DIS-
ABLED” message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
Park Assist Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The switch LED will be ON when ParkSense威is disabled
or defective. The switch LED will be OFF when Park-
Sense威is enabled.
Service ParkSense姞
When the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system is mal-
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition ParkSense威will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ing sure the rear bumper is clean and free of snow, ice,
mud, or other debris, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning ParkSense姞
Clean the ParkSense威sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞System Usage and Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system oper-
ating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense威Rear Park
Assist system.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When you turn ParkSense威off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense威off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.
•
ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
•
If a ParkSense威system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” and the
LED in the ParkSense威switch will illuminate. If this
message continues to appear in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear
bumper is clean and free of snow, ice, mud, or other
debris, see your authorized dealer.
•
Clean the ParkSense威sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威system might not detect an
obstacle behind the bumper, or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the bumper.
•
Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST
SENSORS” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the Park-
Sense威sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system to be able to
stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear bumper when the warning display turns on
the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the ParkSense威sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The Park-
View威camera is located next to the tailgate handle on the
rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞On or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkView姞On or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above
the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
•
Courtesy/Reading Lights
•
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
•
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
•
Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
The HomeLink威buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink威Buttons
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHAN-
NELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC message
states “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device being copied to
HomeLink威for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
It is also advised to park outside the garage while
training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED”.
Then release both the HomeLink威and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”.
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威has
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power sunroof to operate for approximately ten
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front
door is opened.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Open Sunroof — Express Mode
Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate
the Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically. During the Express Open operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will
remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily
pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express
Open Feature.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙button and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof from the vented
position, press forward on the sunroof switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
•
Lower left and lower right of the center stack —
without floor mounted shifter.
•
Inside the top storage tray — with floor mounted
shifter.
Power Outlet — Floor Shifter
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
•
Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
•
Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab威or Crew Cab.
The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tions.
Power Outlet — Upper Lid
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter (Bench Seat)
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Optional Floor Shifter
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
Power Inverter Outlet
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately one second before the
power inverter status indicator turns on. The status
indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether
the inverter is producing AC power.
•
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — (40–20–40
Seats)
The cupholders are located in the pull-out tray at the
bottom of the center stack.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor
mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the
floor console.
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab姞
Quad Cab威vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup-
holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger
convenience.
Cupholders (Floor Mounted Shifter)
Rear Cup Wells
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
STORAGE
Glove Box Storage
The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box
2 — Lower Glove Box
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle
release. The glove box door will automatically open.
To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release
the latch and lower the door.
Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about en-
dangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored
should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.
Center Storage Compartment
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.
Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second
row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage
bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning.
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch Opened Storage Bin
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com-
partment.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
CAUTION!
Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Crew Cab Storage
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Grocery Bag Hooks
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located
on the overhead console. Press the left side of the switch
to open the glass and the right side of the switch to close
the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Rear Window Switch
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab威models with a 60/40 rear seat may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Load Floor In Open Position
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
RAMBOX姞— IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox威system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three fea-
tures:
•
Integrated box side storage bins
•
Cargo extender/divider
•
Bed rail tie-down system
Load Floor Securing Straps
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
RamBox姞Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
•
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
•
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
per bin.
To open a storage bin, press and release the button
located on the lid. The RamBox威lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
RamBox威Cargo Storage Bins
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The interior of the RamBox威will automatically illumi-
nate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch
located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
RamBox威Pushbutton and Lock RamBox威Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time,
it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
The RamBox威storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock.
CAUTION!
•
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
•
Damage to the RamBox威bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to
vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for
damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement and
protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp
objects with appropriate padding.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addi-
tion to other RamBox威accessories) are available from
MOPAR威.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox姞Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•
Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
•
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
RamBox威Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
•
Storage Position
•
Divider Position
•
Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Center Handle and Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard
ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place and assist against theft.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position per-
form the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Side Gates Closed
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
Center Handle and Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
Aligning Gate To Slots
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place
and assist against theft.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
Side Gates Closed
Extender Position
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To install the bed extender into the extender position
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and
handle.
Extender Installation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
•
Cargo must be secured.
•
Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
•
Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
•
Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
•
When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
•
The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
•
When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
•
When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Locking Tab
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat
should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
Adjustable Cleats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat Utility Rail End Cap
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from your authorized dealer.
For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this impor-
tant document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera
the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to
removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector
bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press-
ing inward in the locking tab.
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box)
to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals
do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing the Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera (if
equipped), refer to “Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If
Equipped” in this section.
Locking Tab
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
3. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
4. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
5. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
Locking Tailgate — If Equipped
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The
tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key.
Locking Tang
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 197
䡵Switch Bank Button Description ........... 198
▫Upper Switch Bank ................... 198
▫Lower Switch Bank ................... 199
䡵Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 200
䡵Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 201
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 202
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped .......................... 219
▫EVIC Displays ...................... 221
▫Distance To Empty (DTE) .............. 226
▫Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped ........................ 227
▫Trip Functions ...................... 228
▫System (Customer Information Features) .... 229
▫Compass / Temperature Display ......... 229
▫Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) ...................... 232
4
䡵Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped .................... 238
▫Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped ................. 238
▫Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped ...................... 239
▫Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 239
▫Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN
Radio ............................. 240
䡵Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)....... 243
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 243
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 246
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 248
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 251
䡵Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 252
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 252
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 258
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 260
▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 263
▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 263
䡵Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped .......................... 264
▫Connecting The iPod威................. 265
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫Using This Feature ................... 266
▫Controlling The iPod威Using Radio
Buttons ........................... 266
▫Play Mode ......................... 266
▫List Or Browse Mode ................. 268
䡵Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios
Only)............................... 270
▫System Activation .................... 270
▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 270
▫Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 271
▫Satellite Antenna ..................... 271
▫Reception Quality .................... 271
▫Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 272
▫Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 274
䡵Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
If Equipped .......................... 274
䡵Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 276
▫Radio Operation ..................... 276
▫CD Player ......................... 277
䡵CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 277
䡵Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 278
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 278
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System ............................ 278
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ........................ 283
▫Summer Operation ................... 288
▫Winter Operation .................... 288
▫Vacation/Storage .................... 289
▫Window Fogging And Frosting .......... 289
▫Outside Air Intake ................... 289
▫Operating Tips ...................... 290
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Transfer Case Position Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Upper Switch Bank 10 — Cup Holders 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Upper Switch Bank
The upper switch bank is located on the center of the
instrument panel.
1. TOW/HAUL
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
2. ESP OFF
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
3. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
Refer to “What To Do In Emergencies” for more infor-
mation.
4. 115V POWER INVERTER
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
5. REAR PARK ASSIST
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
6. TPMS LIGHT LOAD — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lower Switch Bank
The lower switch bank is located on the center of the
instrument panel.
1. HEATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
2. VENTILATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
3. HEATED STEERING WHEEL
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
2. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a
rapid rate.
3. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON position.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
diately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling Sys-
tem Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
6. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
8. 4WD Indicator
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine simulta-
neously.
9. 4WD Auto Indicator
The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated
whenever the four-wheel drive mode is auto-
matically engaged.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. SERV (Service) 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
four-wheel drive system. If the SERV 4WD
light stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
11. TOW/HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack upper switch bank. This light will
illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) or Traction Control System (TCS).
13. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
14. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the Check Gauges indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button/ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer display,
trip odometer display or the “ECO” display. Holding the
button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip
mode.
16. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display Area — If Equipped
Odometer Display
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button for
approximately two seconds until the display resets.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ...................Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON ................Fuel Saver Indicator On
door .............................Door Ajar
Lo tirE ...................... LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ............... OilChange Required
LoWASH .................... LowWasher Fluid
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours on the base cluster,
perform the following: Place the ignition in RUN, but do
not start the engine. With the odometer value displayed,
hold the TRIP button down for a period of six seconds.
The odometer will change to trip value first, then it will
display the engine hour value. The engine hours will be
displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is
turned OFF or the engine is started.
Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Area located in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”
for further information.
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the odometer display area.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the TRIP button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Lo tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
Loose
Gascap
Indicator
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
18. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
NOTE: In vehicles with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, the highest
available transmission gear is displayed in the lower
right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) fea-
ture is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to
activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
19. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
20. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam. Push the multifunction lever forward to
switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
21. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer
moves to either extreme left or right and remains there
during normal driving, the electrical system should be
serviced.
NOTE:
•
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari-
ous engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of
the cycling operation is controlled by the engine
control module. Post-heat operation can run for sev-
eral minutes, and then the electrical system and volt-
meter needle will stabilize.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
button on the headlight switch.
23. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a
“Low Tire” message in the odometer (Base Cluster), or in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen
indicating “Low Tire” for EVIC enabled clusters.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned on and
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain
on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come
on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
27. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
28. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
29. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
30. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature
Warning Light, under continued operation, could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn-
ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further
information.
31. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will flash or
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
32. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
33. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-
dent.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status display
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Distance To Empty (DTE) display
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode display
•
Audio Modes display
Steering wheel EVIC control button, as
it appears on the left side of the steer-
ing wheel.
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menus (DTE, mi/gal,
System Info, Messages, Units, Setup) and sub
menus.
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub
menus.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Steering wheel EVIC control button as
it appears on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub menus or to select a
personal setting in the system setup menu.
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub menu.
EVIC Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Wrong Key
•
Damaged Key
•
Key not programmed
•
Key In Ignition
•
Turn Signal On
•
RKE Battery Low
•
LOW WASHER FLUID
•
Oil Change Due > Dealer Info
•
Park Assist On
•
Warning Object Detected
•
Park Assist Disabled
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Park Assist Disabled
•
Service Park Assist System
•
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
•
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
•
Remote start disabled — System fault
•
Remote start disabled — Turn key
•
Remote start active — Key to Run
EVIC Warning Lights
•
Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more door may be ajar.
•
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•
Electronic Speed Control Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON.
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle, will usually be drivable, however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
•
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•
SERV 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light /
Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow ESP/BAS
Warning Light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. They should go out
with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
•
Transmission Temperature Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se-
vere transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature
Indicator, under continued operation, could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
•
Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Due message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
RETURN button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RETURN
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙text and a new DTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Trip Functions
Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
button until one of the following Trip Functions displays
in the EVIC:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion.
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP
ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function
being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press
and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button a
second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “SYS-
TEM” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display anyone of the following choices.
•
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
•
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
•
Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
•
Engine Hours
Displays the hours of engine operation.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside tempera-
ture.
NOTE:
•
The system will display the last known outside tem-
perature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature, therefore temperature
readings are not updated when the vehicle is not
moving.
•
During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with
outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem-
perature. The higher displayed temperature is due to
COMPASS
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient
temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addi-
tion, on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC), it is suggested that the interior
cabin temperature be manually controlled should the
system not perform as desired while in automatic
mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is fol-
lowed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup
displays in the EVIC.
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
following choices.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder-
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will dis-
play in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to “Rear
Park Assist System” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
information.
Auto Lock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
1st Press RKE
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected,
you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors
1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st
Press” appears.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the seat mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90
appears.
Headlamps With Wipers
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
Wiper Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper
operation.
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver
seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
system has been deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed
in reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow
the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid
objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until Off, 45 sec.,
5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “Fuel Saver Mode” message is located in the
Compass/Temperature display, this message can be
turned on or off. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC
appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Uconnect威gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES/RSC Radio
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type
or undefined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
equipped as an option with these radios.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威and
iPhone威devices. Some iPod威software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
•
Connecting an iPod威to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod威may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod威starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
•
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
ing the cable.
•
If the iPod威battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Using This Feature
By using the provided connection cable to connect an
iPod威to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威contents.
•
The iPod威battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威device)
Controlling The iPod姞Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod威and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威(or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ is
available with:
•
Battery-powered two-channel remote control
•
Two remote headphones
•
Integrated remote storage in screen location
•
Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
•
Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios
•
Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
area
•
Nine different medias to choose from in each screen
(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, DVD1, DVD2, Hard Disc Drive
(HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1, AUX2)
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The LCD screen is located in the overhead compartment
console.
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Overhead Video Screen
VES™ Remote Control Location
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio
source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera-
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem-
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor-
mal when the snowplow is removed.
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
1 – Front Blower 4 – DEFROST Mode
2 – Temperature Control 5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
3 – MODE Control 6 – RECIRCULATION Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recircula-
tion mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot
or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation
LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off
to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illu-
minate when the A/C system is
engaged.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX
A/C is selected the A/C is turned on
automatically and the air is recircu-
lated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
•
The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
•
When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using rotary
knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature
setting by using the temperature up and down but-
tons.
•
The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
•
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the temperature controls, the pas-
senger side temperature becomes the same as the
temperature selected by the driver.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1 - Blower Control 9 - DEFROST
2 - Left Temperature Up 10 - Right Temperature Down
3 - SYNC Indicator 11 - A/C
4 - Left Temperature Indicator 12 - A/C Indicator
5 - Right Temperature Indicator 13 - SYNC Temperature Button
6 - DELAY Indicator 14 - Left Temperature Down
7 - Right Temperature Up 15 - RECIRCULATE
8 - MODE
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Operation
1. Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position
on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi-
tion on the ATC Panel.
3. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
passenger temperature buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
4. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC
display until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and
DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display. The
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected, or by adjusting the blower control knob and
setting the fan to any fixed speed.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-
cally.
There are six fixed blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control knob. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off
the airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
Blower Control
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the
ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press
the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
display and deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix, Bi-Level or Defrost Mode, the
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor, Mix and Defrost modes
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Operating Tips
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 297
▫Normal Starting ..................... 297
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 297
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................ 298
▫After Starting ....................... 299
䡵Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 299
䡵Automatic Transmission ................. 300
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 301
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 301
▫Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override .......................... 301
▫Four–Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped ........................ 303
▫Five–Speed Automatic Transmission –
If Equipped ........................ 308
䡵Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped .......................... 314
▫Manually Shifted Transfer Case –
If Equipped ........................ 314
5
▫Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted
Transfer Case ....................... 317
▫Transfer Case Position Indicator Light ...... 318
▫Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped ....... 318
▫Shifting Procedure ................... 322
▫Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped ....... 324
▫Shifting Procedure ................... 329
䡵Axle Locker System (2500 Models Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 331
䡵Safe Off-Road Driving —
Power Wagon Only ..................... 333
▫Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ...................... 333
▫Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ......... 336
▫Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points) .......... 338
▫Hill Climbing ....................... 340
▫Driving Through Water ................ 343
▫Airing Down For Off-Road Driving ....... 345
▫Vehicle Recovery ..................... 346
▫After Driving Off-Road ................ 350
䡵Limited-Slip Differential ................. 351
䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 352
䡵Driving Through Water ................. 352
▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 353
▫Shallow Standing Water ............... 353
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵Driving Off-Road ..................... 355
䡵Winch Usage (Power Wagon Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 356
▫Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . 356
▫Understanding The Features
Of Your Winch ...................... 358
▫Winch Accessories .................... 360
▫Operating Your Winch ................. 361
▫Rigging Techniques ................... 374
䡵Power Steering ....................... 376
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 377
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 378
䡵Brake System ........................ 379
▫3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only ....... 380
▫Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System ....... 380
䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 382
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 382
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 383
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 384
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................ 385
▫Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ........ 388
▫Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............. 393
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 394
▫Tire Markings ....................... 394
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 398
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 399
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 400
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 404
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 404
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 405
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 407
▫Radial Ply Tires ..................... 407
▫Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 407
▫Tire Spinning ....................... 408
▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 409
▫Life Of Tire ........................ 409
▫Replacement Tires .................... 410
䡵Supplemental Tire Pressure Information —
If Equipped .......................... 411
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 412
䡵Snow Tires .......................... 414
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 414
▫Dual Rear Wheels .................... 416
䡵Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 417
▫Tire Pressure Monitor System
Components ........................ 419
▫Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire
Light Load Inflation Switch Description
(2500 Models) – If Equipped ............ 422
▫General Information .................. 426
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 427
▫3.7L And 4.7L Engine ................. 427
▫5.7L Engine ........................ 427
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................ 428
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 428
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 428
▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 429
▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 429
▫Fuel System Cautions ................. 430
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 431
䡵Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 432
▫E85 General Information ............... 432
▫Ethanol Fuel (E85) ................... 433
▫Fuel Requirements ................... 433
▫Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 434
▫Starting ........................... 434
▫Cruising Range ...................... 435
▫Replacement Parts ................... 435
▫Maintenance ........................ 435
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 436
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 437
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 438
▫Certification Label ................... 438
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 440
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 440
▫Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 444
▫Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 445
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 445
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
▫Towing Requirements ................. 447
▫Towing Tips ........................ 455
䡵Snowplow .......................... 457
▫1500 Models Only .................... 457
▫2500/3500 Models Only ................ 457
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 461
▫Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 461
▫Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 461
䡵Equipment Identification Plate ............ 469
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
•
Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving
the shift lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal.
This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust
system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire
which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
2500/3500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
by the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
the c-clip.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to turning the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch
when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once
removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Column Shifter – If Equipped
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery).
1. Turn the key fob to the ACC or ON position without
starting the engine.
2. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of
the steering column.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Center Console Shifter – If Equipped
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully
remove the override cover which is located on the right
of the shift lever gate.
1. Turn the key fob to the ACC or ON position without
starting the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port on the center console.
Interlock Manual Override
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
Four–Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
NOTE: Under extremely cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Interlock Manual Override
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Tow-
ing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled
Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
DRIVE
This range is for most city and highway driving.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
2 (Second)
This range is for moderate grades and to assist braking
on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in
low gear with automatic upshift to second gear. Will not
shift to third gear.
1 (First)
This range is for hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand,
snow, or on steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear
with no upshift. Provides engine compression braking at
low speeds.
Overdrive Operation
The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear (OVERDRIVE).
The transmission will automatically shift from third gear
to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated
•
the transmission has reached normal operating
temperature
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into OVER-
DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “Transmission
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until
the transmission cools down. After the transmission cools
down, the transmission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift to third gear and fourth gear will be enabled under
steady cruise conditions.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-
tions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key fob to
the LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en-
gine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
The shift lever display located in the instrument panel
cluster indicates the transmission gear range. The shift
lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering
column (if equipped) or on the floor console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
shift lever out of the PARK position. To drive, move the
shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. Move the console shift
lever left (-) or right (+), or toggle the switch on the
column shift lever down (-) or up (+) to select the desired
top gear. For example, if the driver shifts the transmission
into 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above
third gear, but can shift down to 2 (second gear) or 1 (first
gear), when needed.
Column Shift Lever
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
On vehicles equipped with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, use of
ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional
underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear im-
proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, first
through third gear are underdrive gears, and fourth gear
is direct drive. ERS fifth gear (Overdrive) is the same as
the normal fourth gear.
When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear,
the first tap down (-), will display the ERS designation for
the current gear (the transmission will not downshift).
For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in third (direct)
gear, when you tap the shift lever/switch one time in the
(-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear).
Another tap down (-) will shift the transmission down to
ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear). When in the DRIVE
position in fifth gear, the first tap down (-) will downshift
the transmission and display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as
normal fourth gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the
transmission down to ERS 4 (direct gear).⬙
To exit ERS mode, press and hold the top of the switch (+)
until “D” is once again highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Console Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display 12345*D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5
* Applies to vehicles equipped with 4.7L and 5.7L
engines only.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left/down (-) and hold it there. The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Gear Ranges
Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position. On four-wheel drive vehicles,
be sure that the transfer case is in a DRIVE position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in
PARK. Make sure it is in PARK before leaving the
vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
DRIVE
This range provides all forward gears, including third
gear direct and fourth or fifth gear overdrive (Refer to
Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city and
highway driving.
Overdrive Operation
The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear (Overdrive).
The transmission will automatically shift from DRIVE to
Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE;
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
•
the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached normal
operating temperature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h);
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating
temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the
transmission cools down. After cool down, the transmis-
sion will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in the TOW/HAUL mode, fifth gear is dis-
abled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifts into Overdrive (fourth gear) are allowed during
steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and automatic
closed-throttle downshifts to third gear are performed
(for improved braking) when driving conditions warrant.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant (antifreeze) are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of
driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the
TOW/HAUL Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as
if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when
cold. This is normal. Pressing the TOW/HAUL switch
when the transmission is sufficiently warm will dem-
onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further informa-
tion.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions.
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
•
Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
•
Neutral (N)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-
shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the transfer case.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
tures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H ⇔4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H or 4H ⇔4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•
Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
•
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
•
Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
mode positions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this
section for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙for your transfer
case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD⇔4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be com-
pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
selected position indicator light will flash and the origi-
nal position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete
the shift.
2WD or 4WD LOCK⇔4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five
mode positions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
•
Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is en-
gaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for spe-
cific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,
4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located on the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. When you select a different transfer case posi-
tion, the position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power
to the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drive-
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON, and the newly selected
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position have been
met. To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD ⇔4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
tor pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot
be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
2WD or 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK ⇔4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (2500 MODELS ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situa-
tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle
with the differentials locked on pavement due to the
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
CAUTION!
•
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced
and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the
axles are locked on hard surfaced roads.
•
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR
LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE
UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the
front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK
position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR
LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low
traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator
light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR
LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the ve-
hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking
action.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause an accident and you may be seriously injured.
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
axle is locked.
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front
axle will lock.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance
may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the
axles.
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY
Off-Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore
those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a
source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you
venture out, you should contact your local governmental
agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
(ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of
Land Management or local Department of Natural Re-
sources are a wealth of information and usually have
maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped
with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This addi-
tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in
severe off-road situations that would be considered im-
passable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle
has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate one
front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to
cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and
drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has
high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross
a pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of
water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3
degrees.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude
into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simulta-
neous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low Range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and
down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,
use 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H
(High Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
•
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range)
if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than neces-
sary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel
no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth, while
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh ⬙bite⬙and help maintain your momentum.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
•
Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
You should use 4L (Low Range) with a gear low
enough to maintain your momentum without shifting.
If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth
for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
•
Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the
appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoid-
ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using a Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This
will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
•
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing a Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-
degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-
mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depend-
ing on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
•
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first
gear and 4L (Low Range) for very steep hills.
•
Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri-
ate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh ⬙bite⬙into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury.
•
Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low
Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually
select first gear on automatic transmissions) and pro-
ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not
allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
•
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
•
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and transmission to
help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEU-
TRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want
to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very
slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]
maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving;
do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids
for signs of water ingestion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy
•
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom con-
ditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
•
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
•
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remem-
ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam-
age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine the
best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle
slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock
cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have
ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a
tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and
easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation
where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are
severely hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to
allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing
further damage. This should be tried before attempting
any recovery method.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional under-
body damage.
•
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-
hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly
used methods. This simply involves shifting your
vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying
throttle after each shift. During this process, for addi-
tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly
back and forth no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn. If you are stuck
in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
this process to clean the debris from the tread and
improve the traction. You want to create a rocking
motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle
momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember
to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the
shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free,
stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous
rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
than an indicated 35 mph (56 km/h).
•
Using the Tow Hooks With a Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle
which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are
designed to take the abusive force generated during
vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow
straps requires coordination between the two drivers.
Good communication and line of sight are required for
a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the
correct attachment points on both vehicles. There
should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to
allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow
straps together using a 1
1
⁄
2
inch hard wood dowel.
This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is
safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next
have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet
worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using
light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap
providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle.
The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov-
ery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires
in the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the
vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously
stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should
hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of
the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without
using the brakes, once signaled by the other driver.
This sequence is important to avoid having the recov-
ered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than two
or three feet of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam-
age. Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from
a strapping or winching situation.
•
Winching (Refer to “Winch Operation” for addi-
tional information) – Winching is most commonly
used in the following situations: there is no support
vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to
recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmen-
tal or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a
great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle
out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This
control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam-
age. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough
to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a
direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and
tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or
increase the winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point
is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable
to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot
find an anchor point within reach try using your spare
tire by burying it. Once you have determined an
anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a
least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a
floor mat or something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable helps
keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place
the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow
slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try
to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch
up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over
or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload
the winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle
while winching. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious or fatal injury.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard, or they might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake drums and rotors,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
packed material. Packed foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary. Failure to do so may result
is serious injury.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs simi-
larly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
NOTE: After off-road usage, particularly in sand or
mud, inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu-
lated dirt at the propeller shaft, axles, U-joints, brake
rotors and calipers.
Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud.
Check the exhaust system and all exposed components
for any sign of damage.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for im-
pacted material. Impacted foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance. Removing the foreign material from
the wheels will correct the situation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc-
tion. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the com-
plete winch owner’s manual.
Tensioning the Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on
the winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re-
quired to tension the wire rope.
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
CAUTION!
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out
for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device
in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor
to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
Winch Components
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system and features a thermal protection switch
that automatically stops motor function in the power-in
direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
3. Winch Drum with Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch
drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch in,
out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle
switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is
left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope
and minimizes damage to the rope.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves:
Wire rope, through
use, will develop ⬙barbs⬙
which can slice skin. It is ex-
tremely important to wear pro-
tective gloves while operating
the winch or handling the wire
rope. Avoid loose fitting
clothes or anything that could
become entangled in the wire
rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without
damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block
is covered in ⬙Before You
Pull.⬙
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clevis/D-Shackles: The
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
threaded to allow easy re-
moval.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typi-
cally made of tough, high-
quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point
for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protect liv-
ing trees.
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
•
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
•
Never use as a hoist.
•
Never use to move persons.
•
Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
•
Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
•
Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
•
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
under load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope
drum is moving.
•
Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
•
Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use
a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
•
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
•
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
•
Never use ⴖbungeeⴖstraps that develop tremen-
dous and potentially dangerous amounts of force
when stretched.
•
Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never winch when there are less than five wraps
of wire rope around the winch drum.
•
Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, then using remote
inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
2. Always take your time when using a winch.
3. Use the right equipment for the situation.
4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
6. Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using the Winch
CAUTION!
•
Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch
and the winching operation.
•
Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
•
Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always keep remote control lead clear of the
drum, wire rope and rigging.
•
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
•
Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
2. Put on gloves.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
strap to the hook (if not attached).
Free Spool Hook Strap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain
amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted
and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to wire rope
damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will with-
stand the load.
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure
anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must
be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural an-
chors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as
low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when
recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the
anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels
to prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want
an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope
to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An
anchor point as far away as possible will provide the
winch with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
Clevis/D-Shackles
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote con-
trol switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well
clear of it and never step over it.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
13. In certain situations you
may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over
the wire rope. A heavy blan-
ket can absorb energy should
the wire rope break. Place it
on the wire rope midway be-
tween the winch and the an-
chor point. Do this before the
wire rope is put under ten-
sion. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.
If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
14. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖzones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely aware
of your intentions before you pull. Declare where the
spectators should not stand - never behind or in front of
the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch
block. Your situation may have other ⴖno peopleⴖzones.
15. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope
is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
No People Zones
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be
slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue
pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are
able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is
complete.
NOTE:
•
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
•
What to look for under load: The wire rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw-
ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch.
So, line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
Using The Remote Control
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
16. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle’s is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and put
the transmission in PARK. Release tension in the wire
rope.
17. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
18. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through
the hand, control the winch at all times.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the
remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when
spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling
drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope
under light tension and spool the wire rope back and
onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this
process until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch
the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach
the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the
wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the
remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control
switch.
19. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
hook.
20. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean and
dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put
the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or main-
taining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think
⬙safety⬙at all times.
How to Change the Pulling Direction
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
Change Pulling Directions
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
will enable you to change your pulling direction while
still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases me-
chanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.
Double Line
Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This
decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,
and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the
snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot-operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The “Brake Warning Light” will come on and
flash to indicate that the parking brake is applied. You
must be sure that the parking brake is fully applied
before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
Parking Brake Release
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica-
tion, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System
WARNING!
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System contains
sophisticated electronic equipment. It may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is de-
signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system operates
with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure
to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on
slippery surfaces.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
The ABS conducts a low-speed selftest at about 10 mph
(16 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a complete stop. This is the result of
the system reverting to the base brake system and is
normal.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light
The ABS includes an amber warning light. When the light
is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard, non-anti-lock brakes.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of the
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions, and are commonly
referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a
limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP)” in this section of this manual. This brake
pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping
to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward
traction.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking dis-
tances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of BAS, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with an-
other vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will
activate.
The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
Towing and Hauling with HSA
The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, lo-
cated on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the
“TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information. In
order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under
towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver
comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes
when the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compen-
sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while
throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from
rolling down the hill.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the incline while resuming accelera-
tion, manually activate the trailer brake or apply
more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the
brake pedal. Always remember the driver is re-
sponsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK or using the parking brake, it will roll down
the incline and could cause a collision with an-
other vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1. Start with the engine OFF, and the vehicle in PARK
with the wheels straight.
2. Start the engine.
3. With the engine running and the brake applied, rotate
the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center.
4. Press the ESP OFF switch four times within 20 sec-
onds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should appear and
disappear four times.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clock-
wise from center).
6. Cycle the ignition switch OFF then ON.
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm
HSA is off.
Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds
to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re-enable
HSA functionality.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
EVIC Equipped Vehicles
HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
refer to “Customer Programmable Features/Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The ESP system enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
ESP OFF Switch
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
•
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
slippery surfaces or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ESP system has multiple operating modes depend-
ing on vehicle type: Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) or Four-
Wheel Drive (4WD). Four-wheel drive vehicles may be
equipped with either a four-mode position (2WD/4WD
LOCK/4WD LOW/NEUTRAL) or a five-mode position
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
(2WD/4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK/4WD LOW/
NEUTRAL) transfer case. If you have a four-wheel drive
vehicle, and want to determine which transfer case is on
your vehicle and how to operate it, refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
All Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, or 4WD
LOCK Modes Can Choose the Following ESP
Operating Modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD/4WD
AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. When-
ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if
equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to
4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESP system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial
Off” or “ESP Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
ESP Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP
OFF switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode, the TCS portion
of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ⬙ESP/TCS
Indicator Light⬙will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on
again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch. This will
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the
ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
In the “Partial Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are desensitized. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
All Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles in 4WD AUTO and
4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose the
Following ESP Operating Mode. This is the Only
ESP Operating Mode in 4WD LOW:
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-road use when ESP stability
features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and holding
the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is
stopped and the engine is running. After five seconds, the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate and the “ESP
Off” message will appear in the odometer. Press and
release the trip odometer button located on the instru-
ment cluster to clear this message.
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
into the PARK position from any other position and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
In this mode, ESP and TCS except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with
off-road driving but ESP function returns to provide the
stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated
when ESP is off. To turn ESP on again, momentarily press
the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESP
On” mode of operation.
“ESP Off” is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD
LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK
or NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, the ESP system will be in
this mode.
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESP Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The “ESP/BAS Warning Light” and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. They should both go out with the engine
running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both. If
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the
vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” will come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP will be
ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it
is active. This is normal. The sounds will stop when
ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESP activation.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro-
priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
TSC is only active in the default “ESP On” mode. TSC can
be disabled by pressing the ESP OFF switch and entering
“ESP Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the “ESP Partial
Off” or “ESP Off” modes. Refer to the ESP portion of this
section for an explanation of the different ESP operating
modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. Refer to “Supple-
mental Tire Pressure Information” in “Starting and Op-
erating” for further information.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the
case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 model trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 0.5 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of 4X2
model trucks.
NOTE:
•
The use of class “S” chains is permitted with P245/
70R17 tires only.
•
The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the front
and rear of 4X4, 2500 model trucks with LT245/
70R17E tires.
•
The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the front
and rear of 4X4, 3500 model trucks with Dual Rear
Wheels and LT235/80R17E tires.
•
On 4X2 2500/3500 model trucks, class “U” snow
chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of
vehicles equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17,
and LT235/80R17 size tires.
•
On 4x4 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel) model
trucks, class “U” snow chains are permitted on the rear
wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265/70R17E.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 model trucks equipped
with P265/70R17, LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, tires.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle. Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front
wheels of 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheels)
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17 LT235/
80R17 tires, or 4X4 front wheels equipped with
LT265/70R17E. There may not be adequate clearance
for the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Dual Rear Wheels
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc-
tion of rotation. This is to accommodate the asym-
metrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
•
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-
mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
Tire Rotation
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure. The
placard pressure is defined on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The Tire and Loading Information
label is located on the drivers side B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for
more than three hours, or driven less than one mile after
a three hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how
to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
As an example, assume your vehicle has a recommended
cold tire inflation placard pressure (parked for more than
3 hours) of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the
Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi
(207 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
lamp will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitor System Components
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Wheel Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” located in
the instrument cluster will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. A system fault can occur by any
of the following scenarios:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that affects ra-
dio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
6. Loss of communication with the tire pressure moni-
toring sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will still turn ON
due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire Light
Load Inflation Switch Description (2500 Models) –
If Equipped
WARNING!
Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire
pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure
settings if carrying more than two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 pounds (91 kg) of cargo. The
vehicle “Light Load Definition” is found in the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which
is located on the rear face of the driver door. Failure
to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an
accident, causing serious or fatal injury.
The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the
driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light load
inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold
depending on the vehicle’s load condition. The Tire and
Loading Information label defines the recommended
front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle
when operating in the Max Load condition. A Supple-
mental Tire Pressure Information label is also available
defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when oper-
ating in the Light Load condition. When the tire light
load inflation switch LED is ON, the TPMS is using the
light load inflation pressure (cold) low inflation warning
thresholds.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation – If
Equipped
•
This vehicle may have different recommended tire
pressure values between the front and rear tires as
shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and
the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label. It is
also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro-
priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle
Max Load condition.
Tire Light Load Inflation Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
•
The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver
to change between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold depending on the vehicle’s load condition.
Refer to the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information”
label for the vehicle’s Light Load inflation pressures
and “Tire and Loading Information” label for the
vehicle’s Max Load inflation pressures.
To switch from the max load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation
pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold, begin by
placing the ignition switch in the RUN position. Next,
lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load
Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental
Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Information label. The Supplemental Tire
Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of
the driver door. Use an accurate tire gauge to check the
tire pressures when lowering all four tire pressures. After
all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light
Load inflation pressures, press the tire light load inflation
switch. If the tire light load inflation switch’s amber
colored LED turns ON, the TPMS is using the light load
inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning thresh-
olds.
If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED
flashes on and off for 10 seconds, after all four tire
pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation
pressures, the pressure in any one of the four tires may
not be at the light load inflation pressure (cold) values as
indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on
the rear face of the driver door. Using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, re-check the tire pressures for the light
load inflation pressure (cold) value.
WARNING!
It is the driver’s responsibility to change to the max
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold condition when not driving in the light
load condition as defined as two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 pounds (91 kg) of cargo. The
vehicle “Light Load Definition” is found in the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label lo-
cated on the rear face of the driver door. Failure to do
so may cause you to lose control resulting in an
accident, causing serious or fatal injury.
To switch back to the max load inflation pressure (cold)
low pressure warning threshold, press the tire light load
inflation switch. It is not necessary to first fill the tires to
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
the max load inflation pressure (cold) values to switch
the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold. If after pressing
the tire light load inflation switch, and tire pressures are
below the max load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure
warning thresholds, the TPMS low pressure warning
telltale light (located in the instrument cluster) will turn
ON and a chime will sound. The tire pressures are now
required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) values described on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. The Tire and Loading Information label is
located on the drivers side B-pillar. If the tire light load
inflation switch LED turns OFF, the TPMS has been reset
and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning thresholds.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7L and 4.7L Engine
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability for the engine
and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers are not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
E85 Fuel Cap
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
E85 Badge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel
filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel
door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-
clockwise.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard/felt. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in an accident.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) without added equipment or alter-
ations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow
Prep Package. See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of Weight-
Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com.
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for fur-
ther information.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. With
four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is
not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four ratings
are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This
requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the
10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of
total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
Your vehicle may have a Integrated Trailer Brake Module
for electric trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module is designed for only electric trailer
brakes. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer,
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN/ Brake Output Power Display
Shows the current GAIN setting.
1 — GAIN/Brake Output Power Display
2 — Manual Brake Control Lever
3 — Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
4 — GAIN Adjustment Buttons
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
This display may also be used to display diagnostic
information, if needed.
•
SC — Short Circuit to Ground
•
Sb — Short to Battery
•
CF — Controller Fault – If this message appears on the
display, see your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle brakes are applied, the display will no
longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the
trailer brakes.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally, and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the
GAIN setting will illuminate.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or
decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A
GAIN setting of 6 is a good starting point for heavier
loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.
NOTE: A aftermarket controller may be available for
use with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on your
trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or
wiring should be performed by a qualified automo-
tive technician. If done improperly it may cause
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
result in serious or fatal injury.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
“TOW/HAUL” mode (if equipped) or select a lower gear
using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear
range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
conditions will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Tow/Haul
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature) on more severe
grades.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli-
sion resulting in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in an acci-
dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
described earlier in this manual
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Dodge Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in an acci-
dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
described earlier in this manual
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
rior lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing
•
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
•
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness.
•
Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to
1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
•
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.dodge.com or refer to the current Dodge Body
Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-
sengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over the Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera-
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem-
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor-
mal when the snowplow is removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drive-
train damage, the following precautions should be ob-
served.
•
Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
•
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing of two-wheel drive models is not
allowed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can
result in severe transmission damage.
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe
damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans-
fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into the
PARK position for recreational towing. Refer to the
following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL shifting
procedure for your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Recreational Towing Procedure (Manual Shift
Transfer Case) – If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Press the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in DRIVE.
10. Turn OFF the engine and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior
to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Returning to Normal Operation – Manual Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shut OFF the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case lever into desired position.
7. Shift the transmission into PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
the internal parts.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing Procedure (Electronic Shift
Transfer Case) – If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Press the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for
four seconds.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Turn the engine OFF and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Apply the parking brake.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar.
16. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
•
The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL
from the 4WD AUTO (if equipped) position.
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the four seconds elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no
longer met during the four second timer, then the
NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
The flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
shift requirements have not been met.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Returning to Normal Operation – Electronic Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Press the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for
one second.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button
and must continue to be met until one second elapses
and the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements (with the exception of step 3 - key ON)
are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or
are no longer met during the one second time, then all
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
of the mode position indicator lights will flash con-
tinuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL button is released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
transfer case shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is
not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
The flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss
will damage internal parts.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is dis-
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equip-
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
Plate when ordering parts.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 472
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 472
▫Jack Location ....................... 473
▫Removing The Spare Tire ............... 478
▫Preparations ........................ 479
▫Instructions ........................ 480
▫Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . 487
▫Wheel Nuts ........................ 488
▫To Stow The Flat Or Spare .............. 490
䡵Hoisting ............................ 491
䡵Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 491
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 492
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 493
䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 495
䡵Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 496
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 497
▫Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 497
▫Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 498
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may discharge your battery.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to an
authorized service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Removal
To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the
plastic access cover, located on the side of the seat. To
remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest
to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking
tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat
frame.
Jack Access Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
Jack and Tools (1500 Series)
Jack and Tools (2500/3500 Series)
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-
tion or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
1. Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag (unrolled). Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Turn Screw and Lug
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical
package (in direction of arrows) and tie to the jack using
the tie straps.
Folding Flap and Rolling Bag
Tying Bag to Jack with Straps
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor, and then secure to the floor pan
using the wing bolt. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack and Tools Tied Jack and Tools (1500 Series)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube.
Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun-
terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
NOTE: Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack and Tools (2500/3500 Series)
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
Removing the Spare Tire
1 — Wheel Wrench
2 — Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
•
1500 Series Trucks
When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown
below.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not
required.
4X2 Jacking Location
4X4 Jacking Location
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
•
2500/3500 Series Trucks
For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a front
wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind
the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as possible on
the straight part of the frame.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but is not
required.
For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front
wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and
connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the
drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube
extension and wheel wrench.
4x2 Jacking Location
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
4x4 Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location (All)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the
dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On
single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel
and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel
nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models
(DRW) the wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a
flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To avoid the risk
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the wheel
nuts using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 130 ft lbs (177 N·m) torque (1500 Series), 135 ft
lbs (183 N·m) torque for 2500/3500 single-rear wheel
(SRW) models, and 145 ft lbs (197 N·m) for 3500 dual
rear-wheel models. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear-wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pry-off notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back-and-forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
CAUTION!
•
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the
hub cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
•
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pry-off notches. Make sure that the hook of the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt
holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially
important during the first few hundred miles/kilometers
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the
wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recom-
mended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the
wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tight-
ened until final torque is achieved. Recommended torques
are shown in the following chart.
Disc
Wheels
Type Nut Stud Size Torque
Ft. Lbs.
Torque
Newton
Meters
Cone 9/16-18 120-150 160-200
Flanged 9/16-18 130-160 190-220
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
washer.
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening, to ensure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire
installations must also be observed.
Oiling Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can-
not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel
retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure
the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Tightening Pattern
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or
four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not
attempt jump-starting because the battery could rup-
ture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery
temperature must be brought above the freezing
point before attempting a jump-start.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap-
plying slight pressure to the accelerator. In general, the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain
the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing
the engine is most effective.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission shift lever
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The transfer case must be in the neutral position and the
transmission must be in PARK to tow a four-wheel drive
vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods could result
in damage to the transfer case. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
LOCK position along with the front wheels raised and
the rear wheels on the ground. Speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed
15 miles (25 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km) can cause severe damage to the
transmission. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h)
or more than 15 miles (25 km) the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. It may also be towed on a flatbed or with the
front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly.
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 502
䡵Engine Compartment — 4.7L ............. 503
䡵Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 504
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) ....... 505
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 505
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 506
䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 507
䡵Dealer Service ........................ 507
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 508
▫Engine Oil ......................... 509
▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 511
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 512
▫Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 512
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 514
▫Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models ............. 515
▫Body Lubrication .................... 515
7
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 516
▫Adding Washer Fluid ................. 516
▫Exhaust System ..................... 517
▫Cooling System ..................... 520
▫Brake System ....................... 525
▫Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ............................. 527
▫Transfer Case ....................... 528
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 528
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 531
䡵Fuses .............................. 536
▫Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 536
䡵Vehicle Storage ....................... 541
䡵Replacement Bulbs .................... 542
䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 543
▫Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And
Turn Signal — If Equipped ............. 543
▫Fog Lamps ......................... 545
▫Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps ............................ 545
▫Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp .................... 546
▫Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . 548
▫Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear
Wheels) — If Equipped ................ 550
▫Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped ........................ 551
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵Fluid Capacities ...................... 552
䡵Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 554
▫Engine ............................ 554
▫Chassis ........................... 555
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped) 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Integrated Power Module
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBDII. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immedi-
ate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle’s diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard/felt. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine oper-
ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
quality requirements are met and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water or is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in your eyes or on your skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of water.
(Continued)
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and (-) negative and are identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi-
tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. Use MOPAR威Type MS-6560 (lithium-based
grease), or equivalent.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
diator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
(-37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level
position. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole for the manufacturer’s C205F HD front
axles. The fluid level should be 5/8 in (16 mm) below the
fill hole on 9 1/4 in manufacturer’s rear axles.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4” ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on
the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on
10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Drain and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
Limited-Slip Differentials This vehicle requires that
4 oz. (118 ml) MOPAR威Limited Slip Additive or equiva-
lent be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information. The MOPAR威Limited
Slip Additive or equivalent should be added to the gear
lubricant whenever a fluid change is made.
2500/3500 Model Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
Transfer Case
Drain and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Fluid Level Check
If equipped with a dipstick, use the following procedure.
If your vehicle has a capped dipstick tube, it is sealed and
should not be tampered with. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set
properly. The fluid level should be checked when the
engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmis-
sion is at normal operating temperature. Operation of the
transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly
reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check
the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Fluid Level Check – 42RLE/545RFE
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” or further information.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The totally integrated power module (TIPM) is located in
the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J01 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – Presafe #1
J02 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – Trailer Tow
Main
J03 25 Amp
Natural
Bat – Passenger Door
Node
J04 40 Amp
Green
Bat – ABS Pump
J05 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – ABS Valve
J06 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – H/Lamp Wash/
MTV/CM2200/Elec
Vac Pump
J07 25 Amp
Natural
Bat – Driver Door
Node
J08 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – DTCM/Axle
Locks
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J09 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – Plg/Electric
Brake
J10 40 Amp
Green
Bat – L/Bar/Off-Road
J11 30 Amp
Pink
Bat – Sway/
Thatchum/Rear
Doors
J12 40 Amp
Green
Starter Solenoid
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
Bat – Rad Fan #1/#2/
SSR
J14 40 Amp
Green
Bat – Folding Seat/
PZEV
J15 60 Amp
Yellow
Bat – IOD Main
J16 40 Amp
Green
Frt HVAC Motor
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M17 25 Amp
Natural
Bat – Sunroof/
Skylight
M18 25 Amp
Natural
TCM/Trans Range
M19 5 Amp
Tan
Ign R/ACC –
Sunroof/Window Sw
Illum
M20 25 Amp
Natural
Frt Wiper
M21 25 Amp
Natural
Door Locks
M22 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
M23 20 Amp
Yellow
Bat – Trlr Light/Pre-
Safe #2
M24 20 Amp
Yellow
Bat – Trlr Tow BUX/
HGM
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M25 10 Amp
Red
Bat – J1962 Diag/
Mirrors
M26 10 Amp
Red
Bat – Ign Sw, WIN,
PASS
M27 15 Amp
Blue
Bat – CHMSL/Brake
Sw
M28 10 Amp
Red
Bat – Corax TPM/
PEM/HVAC Htr
Pump
M29 15 Amp
Blue
Bat – Folding Mirror
M30 25 Amp
Natural
Bat – Inverter
M31 20 Amp
Yellow
Bat – Pwr Out #1
M32 20 Amp
Yellow
Fr/Rr Washer
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M33 15 Amp
Blue
Bat – NGC/EATX/
PCM
M34 15 Amp
Blue
Bat – CCN/Interior
Light/SCM/Sw Bank
M35 20 Amp
Yellow
Ign R-Frt Seat/Vent
M36 20 Amp
Yellow
Ign R-Rear Seat/Steer
Wheel
M37 10 Amp
Red
Horn #1
M38 20 Amp
Yellow
IOD-CCN/Interior
Mods
M39 30 Amp
Green
IOD-Amp/Radio
M40 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M41 15 Amp
Blue
IOD-SDARS/VES
2–3/DVD/HFM/
UGDO/Vanity Lamp
M42 10 Amp
Red
IOD-HVAC, U/Hood
Lamp
M43 10 Amp
Red
Horn #2
M44 10 Amp
Red
IGN R/S-ORC/OCM
M45 10 Amp
Red
IGN R-ORC/Trail
Tow (BUX) Sense
M46 20 Amp
Yellow
IGN R-Trail Tow
(BUX)
M47 10 Amp
Red
IGN R-H/Lamp
Wash/HVAC/Park
Assist/Ir Sns
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M48 20 Amp
Yellow
IGN R/ACC-Pwr
Outlet #2
M49 20 Amp
Yellow
IGN R/ACC/Bat-Pwr
Outlet #3
M50 25 Amp
Natural
ASD #1, #2
M51 20 Amp
Yellow
ASD #3
M52 10 Amp
Red
IGN R/S-SWAY/
TCASE/DTCM/FAD
M53 15 Amp
Blue
IGN R/S-MFSW/
CNN/SCM/TPM/RR
View
M54 20 Amp
Yellow
IOD – Spare
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the totally integrated power mod-
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse located in
the Integrated Power Module, located in the engine
compartment. The IOD cavity includes a snap-in re-
tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without
removing it from the fuse block.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
NOTE:
•
When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully
seated; the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a
full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the
RUN position. This is a normal condition.
•
When the vehicle is shipped from the factory, the IOD
fuse is in the up or extracted position. If the radio,
interior lamps, keyless entry or other features do not
work with the key OFF, check the position of the fuse
(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the
instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis-
play ⬙NO FUSE.”
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lamps ............... TS212-2
Dome Lamp ...........................7679
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Backup................................ 921
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) .....921
Fog Lamp .............................9145
Dual Headlamp .........................H13
Quad Headlamp – Low Beam ............... H11
Quad Headlamp – High Beam .............. 9005
Side Marker (Dual Headlamp) .............3157K
Side Marker (Quad Headlamp)............3157NA
Rear License Plate Lamp ................... 194
Rear Cargo Lamp ........................921
Rear Tail/Turn and Stop..................3157K
Cab Roof Marker Lamps ................. 194NA
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp.............. 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) ........ 194
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Dual or Quad Headlamp/Front Park and Turn
Signal — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen-
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
CAUTION!
•
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
•
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
bulb has been replaced.
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lamps
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise
1
⁄
4
turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal and Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard
side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post
retainers in the outer box side panel.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-
ing harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket
1
⁄
4
turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket
1
⁄
4
turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access
to the bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
(Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified). For 2500/
3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight
rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Metric
Cooling System
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 14 Quarts 13 Liters
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 14 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine — 1500 Models (MOPAR威Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 16 Quarts 15 Liters
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
18.7 Quarts 17.7 Liters
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models w/Heavy Duty
(MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
19.2 Quarts 18.2 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – For 2500/3500 trucks operating un-
der a gross combined weight rating greater than
14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [.99 mm]) Lower Bank
— FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Fuel Selection – 3.7L and 4.7L Engines 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Transfer Case – NVG 246 Only MOPAR威NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive
Models GL-5 SAE 75W-90 (MS-9763) or equivalent.
Rear Axle – 1500 Models MOPAR威Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip
Rear Axles require the addition of 118 ml (4 oz.) MOPAR威Limited Slip
Additive or equivalent.
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500
Models Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90 or equivalent. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch
Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 558
䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 558
▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 560
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 559
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicle’s built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs. One set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(80 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(160 000 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and
5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏Replace the side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L
Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500
(4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 579
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 579
▫Prepare A List ...................... 579
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 579
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 579
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 580
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 580
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 580
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 581
▫Service Contract ..................... 581
䡵Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 582
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 582
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 582
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 582
▫In Canada ......................... 583
9
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 583
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 584
▫Treadwear ......................... 585
▫Traction Grades ..................... 585
▫Temperature Grades .................. 585
578 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ........................... 436
Adjustable Pedals ....................... 127
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 512
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............514
Air Conditioning ........................278
Air Conditioning Controls .................278
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............290
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 514,515
Air Conditioning System ............. 278,283,514
Air Pressure, Tires ....................405,411
Airbag ..............................50,58
Airbag Deployment .......................60
Airbag Light ................... 51,57,62,79,216
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 61
Airbag, Side ..........................56,58
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........53,56,58
Alarm Light ...........................205
Alarm, Panic ............................24
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................271
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............521,552
Disposal ............................523
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 382
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............216,381
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Anti-Theft System ........................18
Appearance Care ........................ 531
Ashtray ...............................158
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................88
Automatic Headlights .....................116
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 283
Automatic Transmission ................... 303
Adding Fluid .........................530
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 531
Fluid Level Check ...................528,529
588 INDEX
Fluid Type ........................528,555
Gear Ranges .........................303
Shifting .............................308
Special Additives ...................... 531
Torque Converter ...................... 307
Axle Fluid ..........................527,555
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............527
Back-Up Camera ........................ 141
Battery ...............................512
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......24
Saving Feature (Protection) ............... 120
Belts, Seat ............................38,79
Body Builders Guide ....................... 6
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............515
B-Pillar Location ........................ 400
Brake Assist System ......................384
Brake Control System, Electronic .............382
Brake Fluid .........................525,555
Brake System ........................ 379,525
Anti-Lock (ABS) .................... 380,382
Fluid Check .......................... 525
Master Cylinder .......................525
Parking .............................378
Warning Light ........................211
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............301
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........76
Bulb Replacement ....................... 543
Bulbs, Light ..........................79,542
Cab Top Clearance Lights ..................548
Calibration, Compass .....................230
Camera, Rear ........................... 141
Camper ...............................189
Capacities, Fluid ........................552
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) .......................... 510
Power Steering ........................377
10
INDEX 589
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............... 522
Car Washes ............................ 532
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 78,431
Cargo Light ............................120
Cellular Phone ..........................94
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 546
Center Lap Belts .........................47
Center Seat Storage Compartment ............ 166
Certification Label .......................438
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................396
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............215,506
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 77
Checks, Safety ........................... 77
Child Restraint ........................ 64,65
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............68,71
Child Seat ............................ 65,70
Cigar Lighter ........................... 158
Cleaning
Wheels .............................533
Climate Control ......................... 278
Clock ........................239,240,244,253
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............277
Compass ..............................229
Compass Calibration .....................230
Compass Variance .......................231
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................228
Connector
UCI ................................264
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........264
Conserving Fuel ......................227,228
Console, Overhead ....................... 143
Contract, Service ........................ 581
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........522
Cooling System .........................520
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............521
Coolant Capacity ......................552
590 INDEX
Coolant Level ......................520,523
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 523
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................. 520
Inspection ...........................523
Points to Remember .................... 524
Pressure Cap ......................... 522
Radiator Cap ......................... 522
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......521,552,554
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............128
Cupholders ............................161
Customer Assistance ..................... 579
Daytime Running Lights ...................121
Dealer Service .......................... 507
Defroster, Rear Window ...................171
Defroster, Windshield ................79,281,287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 123
Differential, Limited-Slip ..................351
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................. 529
Power Steering ........................377
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............523
Door Locks .............................28
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 145
Driving
Off-Pavement .........................333
Off-Road ............................333
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 352
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy .... 227
Dual Rear Wheels ..................... 416,489
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) .... 274
E-85 Fuel .............................432
Electric Rear Window Defrost ...............171
Electrical Power Outlets ...................154
10
INDEX 591
Electronic Brake Control System .............382
Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 382
Brake Assist System ....................384
Electronic Stability Program ...............388
Traction Control System .................383
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............... 308
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 128
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............388
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................141,219
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ........ 318,324
Emergency Brake ........................378
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 495
Hazard Warning Flasher .................472
Jump Starting .........................491
Tow Hooks ..........................496
Towing .............................497
Emission Control System Maintenance ......506,558
Engine ..........................502,503,504
Air Cleaner ..........................512
Block Heater .........................299
Break-In Recommendations ................76
Compartment Identification .........502,503,504
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................554
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 78,431
Flooded, Starting ......................298
Fuel Requirements ..................... 552
Jump Starting .........................491
Oil ...........................509,552,554
Oil Filler Cap .........................510
Oil Selection .......................510,552
Oil Synthetic .........................511
Temperature Gauge ....................202
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........59
Equipment Identification Plate .............. 469
Exhaust Gas Caution ................78,431,518
Exhaust System .......................78,517
592 INDEX
Exterior Lighting ........................116
Exterior Lights ..........................79
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................512
Engine Oil ........................511,554
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 511
Flashers
Turn Signal ...................... 79,121,202
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 490
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .......................435
Engine Oil ........................... 434
Fuel Requirements ..................432,433
Maintenance .........................435
Replacement Parts .....................435
Starting .............................434
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 298
Fluid, Brake ...........................555
Fluid Capacities ......................... 552
Fluid Leaks ............................. 80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................. 529
Brake ..............................525
Power Steering ........................377
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........554
Fog Lights ....................... 118,216,545
Fold Flat Load Floor .....................173
Four Wheel Drive ....................... 314
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................472
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................495
Front Axle (Differential) ...................527
Fuel .................................427
Adding .............................436
Conserving ........................227,228
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................437
Gauge ..............................202
Light ...............................210
10
INDEX 593
Octane Rating ...................... 427,554
Requirements ......................427,552
Saver Mode .......................227,228
Tank Capacity ........................ 552
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Optimizer .........................227
Fuel Saver ............................. 227
Fuel System Caution .....................436
Fuses ................................536
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........145
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............437,505
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 427
Conserving ........................227,228
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................428
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................202
Fuel ...............................202
Oil Pressure .......................... 205
Speedometer .........................203
Tachometer ..........................202
Voltmeter ............................ 210
Gear Ranges ........................ 303,310
General Information .................. 17,25,426
Glass Cleaning .......................... 535
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................170
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 441
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................440
Guide, Body Builders ...................... 6
GVWR ...............................438
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............. 94
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 352
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 472
Head Restraints ..........................97
Headlights ............................543
594 INDEX
Automatic ...........................116
Cleaning ............................535
High Beam ..........................122
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 122
Lights On Reminder ....................120
Passing .............................122
Switch ..............................116
Heated Mirrors .......................91,171
Heated Seats ...........................102
Heater ...............................278
Heater, Engine Block .....................299
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 122
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................444
Hoisting ..............................491
HomeLink威(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 145
Hood Release .......................... 113
Hub Caps ............................. 487
Ignition ...............................14
Key............................... 12,14
Ignition Key Removal .....................14
Illuminated Entry ........................ 19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint ........................64,65
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................411
Information Center, Vehicle .................219
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................87
Instrument Cluster .................198,200,202
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............197
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 536
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 536
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls .............450
Interior Appearance Care .................. 534
Interior Lights .......................... 119
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 123
Introduction .............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) ..................... 159
10
INDEX 595
Jack Location ...........................472
Jump Starting .......................... 491
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................ 52
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............121
Lane Change Assist ......................122
Lap Belts .............................. 47
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 38
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ..............................68
Latches ................................80
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 80
Life of Tires ............................ 409
Light Bulbs ............................. 79
Lights ..............................79,115
Airbag ......................51,57,62,79,216
Alarm ..............................205
Anti-Lock ...........................216
Anti-Lock Warning .....................381
Automatic Headlights ...................116
Brake Warning ........................211
Bulb Replacement ...................542,543
Cap Top Clearance .....................548
Cargo .............................. 120
Center Mounted Stop ................... 546
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) ........ 215
Courtesy/Reading .....................144
Daytime Running ......................121
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 389
Exterior ..............................79
Fog ..........................118,216,545
596 INDEX
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ...............318
Hazard Warning Flasher .................472
Headlights ...........................116
High Beam ........................122,210
High Beam Indicator .................... 210
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............122
Illuminated Entry ....................... 19
Instrument Cluster ..................198,202
Interior ..........................119,144
Lights On Reminder ....................120
Low Fuel ............................210
Oil Pressure .......................... 212
Passing .............................122
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 217
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............205
Service ...........................542,543
Side Marker ..........................551
SmartBeams ..........................117
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............205
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........... 213
Traction Control ....................... 389
Transfer Case ......................... 318
Turn Signal ................... 79,121,543,545
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . 198,202
Limited-Slip Differential ................351,528
Loading Vehicle ......................... 438
Tires ...............................400
Locks .................................28
Child Protection ........................32
Door ................................28
Power Door ...........................29
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ..............................68
Lubrication, Body .......................515
Maintenance ...........................508
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 512
Maintenance Procedures ...................508
10
INDEX 597
Maintenance Schedule .................... 558
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....506
Manual, Service ......................... 583
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check .....................528
Lubricant Selection .....................555
Memory Seat ...........................108
Mini-Trip Computer ......................228
Mirrors ................................87
Automatic Dimming ..................... 88
Electric Powered ....................... 90
Heated ..............................91
Memory ............................108
Outside ..............................88
Rearview .............................87
Trailer Towing .........................93
Mode
Fuel Saver ........................ 227,228
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 417
Mopar Parts ......................... 507,582
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 121
Navigation System (Uuconnect威gps) ..........141
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 76
Occupant Restraints ...................37,56,60
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ............. 53,56,58
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............427
Odometer .............................206
Trip ................................ 206
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ..........333,355
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ..........333,355
Oil Change Indicator .................. 208,226
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............208,226
Oil, Engine ......................... 509,554
Capacity ............................552
Change Interval .......................509
598 INDEX
Dipstick .............................509
Disposal ............................511
Filter ............................511,554
Filter Disposal ........................ 511
Identification Logo ..................... 510
Materials Added to ..................... 511
Pressure Gauge ....................... 205
Recommendation ...................510,552
Synthetic ............................511
Viscosity ......................... 510,552
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 505,506
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........145
Operating Precautions ....................505
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................. 88
Overdrive ..........................305,311
Overdrive OFF Switch ................. 305,311
Overhead Console .......................143
Overheating, Engine ...................... 203
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,583
Panic Alarm ............................ 24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................132
Parking Brake .......................... 378
Passing Light ...........................122
Pedals, Adjustable ....................... 127
Personal Settings ........................ 232
Pets ..................................76
Pets, Transporting ........................ 76
Phone, Cellular ..........................94
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) ..............94
Pickup Box ............................175
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........400
Power
Door Locks ........................... 29
Mirrors ..............................90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......154,159
Seats ...............................100
10
INDEX 599
Sliding Rear Window ...................172
Steering ..........................376,377
Sunroof .............................152
Windows ............................. 34
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 555
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............49
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................48
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 232
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
Radial Ply Tires .........................407
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......520,522
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威studios) ...........270
Ramp Travel Index ....................... 334
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................527
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ...............187
Rear Park Sense System ................... 132
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 106
Rear Window Features ....................171
Rear Window, Sliding ..................... 172
Reclining Front Seats ...................... 96
Reclining Rear Seats ...................... 105
Recreational Towing ......................461
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .... 462,465
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . 463,467
Reformulated Gasoline ....................428
Refrigerant ............................515
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................48
Remote Control
Starting System ........................25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........276
Remote Starting System .................... 25
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts ....................... 507
Replacement Tires ....................... 410
600 INDEX
Reporting Safety Defects ...................582
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........208,226
Restraint, Head ..........................97
Restraints, Child ....................... 64,70
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 37
Rotation, Tires ..........................414
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 79
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................582
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 78
Safety Information, Tire ...................394
Safety Tips ............................. 77
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................271
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威studios) ...........270
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 558
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................536
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 48
Seat Belts .......................... 37,38,79
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 46
And Pregnant Women ...................49
Child Restraint .......................64,76
Extender .............................50
Front Seat ............................38
Inspection ............................79
Pretensioners ..........................48
Reminder ............................217
Seats ...............................94,104
Adjustment ...........................94
Child ...............................76
Folding Floor ......................... 173
Heated .............................102
Memory ............................108
Power ..............................100
Rear Folding ......................... 106
Reclining .............................96
Reclining Rear ........................ 105
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
10
INDEX 601
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........521,554
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance .......................579
Service Contract .........................581
Service Manuals ........................ 583
Setting the Clock ................ 239,240,244,253
Settings, Personal ........................ 232
Shifting ...............................300
Automatic Transmission ..............303,308
Transfer Case ......................... 317
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ....................462,465
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ....................463,467
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage .............. 46
Shoulder Belts ........................... 38
Signals, Turn ......................79,121,202
Sliding Rear Window
Power ..............................172
SmartBeams ...........................117
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................412
Snow Plow ............................ 457
Snow Tires ............................414
Spare Tire ............................. 407
Spark Plugs ............................ 554
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............128
Speedometer ...........................203
Starting .............................25,297
Automatic Transmission ................. 297
Engine Fails to Start ....................298
Remote ..............................25
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............ 297
Steering
Power ...........................376,377
Wheel, Heated ........................ 125
Wheel, Tilt ........................... 124
602 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................276
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ...........166
Storage, Vehicle ......................289,541
Storing Your Vehicle ......................541
Sun Roof .............................. 152
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........411
Sway Control, Trailer ..................... 393
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................511
System, Remote Starting .................... 25
Tachometer ............................202
Tailgate ...............................189
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........283
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......... 202
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint .............68,71
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 124
Tip Start .............................. 298
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......400,411
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 398
Tire Markings ..........................394
Tire Safety Information .................... 394
Tires ............................79,404,584
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................409
Air Pressure .......................... 404
Chains ..............................412
Dual ............................416,489
General Information ....................404
High Speed ..........................407
Inflation Pressures .....................405
Life of Tires ..........................409
Load Capacity ........................400
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 417
Pressure Warning Light ..................213
Quality Grading ....................... 584
Radial ..............................407
Replacement .........................410
Rotation ............................414
10
INDEX 603
Safety ...........................394,404
Sizes ...............................396
Snow Tires ........................... 414
Spinning ............................408
Tread Wear Indicators ...................409
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............445
Torque Converter Clutch ................ 307,313
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................496
Towing ...............................440
Disabled Vehicle .......................497
Guide ..............................445
Recreational ..........................461
Weight ..............................445
Traction .............................. 352
Traction Control ...................... 205,383
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................393
Trailer Towing .......................... 440
Cooling System Tips ....................456
Hitches .............................444
Minimum Requirements ................. 447
Mirrors ..............................93
Trailer and Tongue Weight ...............445
Wiring .............................. 453
Trailer Towing Guide .....................445
Trailer Weight .......................... 445
Transfer Case ........................... 528
Electronically Shifted .................318,324
Fluid ...............................555
Transmission ........................... 303
Automatic ......................303,308,528
Fluid ...............................555
Maintenance .........................528
Shifting .............................300
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 145
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
604 INDEX
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 20
Tread Wear Indicators ....................409
Trip Odometer ..........................206
Turn Signals ................... 121,202,543,545
UCI Connector ......................... 264
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 94
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 584
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 264
Universal Transmitter .....................145
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...............187
Variance, Compass ....................... 231
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 7
Vehicle Loading ......................400,438
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .......................289,541
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................274
Voice Recognition System (VR) ............... 94
Voltmeter ............................. 210
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ..........198,202
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ..................... 582
Washers, Windshield ..................124,516
Washing Vehicle ......................... 532
Water
Driving Through ......................352
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................533
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................533
Wheel Cover ........................... 487
Wheel Nut Torque ....................... 488
Winch ................................ 356
Accessories ..........................360
Operation ...........................361
Rigging Techniques ..................... 374
10
INDEX 605
Usage ..............................356
Wind Buffeting .......................37,154
Window Fogging ........................289
Windows .............................. 34
Power ...............................34
Rear Sliding .......................... 172
Windshield Defroster ...................... 79
Windshield Washers ................ 123,124,516
Fluid ............................123,516
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 516
Windshield Wipers .......................123
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................516
Wipers, Intermittent ......................123
606 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10D241-126-AB 2nd Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu